<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Harald+Friedrich</id>
	<title>TARGET 3001! PCB Design Freeware is a Layout CAD Software|Support, Tutorials, Shop - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Harald+Friedrich"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php/Special:Contributions/Harald_Friedrich"/>
	<updated>2026-05-20T18:58:50Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.42.1</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=AI_Assistant_%22T-3001%22&amp;diff=29411</id>
		<title>AI Assistant &quot;T-3001&quot;</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=AI_Assistant_%22T-3001%22&amp;diff=29411"/>
		<updated>2026-03-20T10:13:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version V34, the AI assistant named “T-3001” is available in the bottom-right corner of the TARGET interface as a chatbot to answer your questions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:KI-AssistentT-3001.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 1: Ki-Assistent &amp;quot;T-3001&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also call “T-3001” without TARGET [https://office.ibfriedrich.com/chatBot/T-3001_en.html here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please enter your questions about using TARGET 3001! The more specific your question is, the higher the chance of getting a useful answer. If you notice that “T-3001” doesn’t understand your question correctly or gives an unhelpful answer, simply enter your email address in the input field below and press [Return]. The chat history will then be forwarded directly to the TARGET team and promptly answered by a human via email as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The AI assistant “T-3001” is still in training and may provide incorrect or even dangerous answers. Users must always first verify the plausibility of every answer! The questions and answers are processed by an external artificial intelligence (AI) system. The questions and answers are stored on our servers for one week.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, do not include any private or confidential information in your inquiries. Please report any incorrect or inappropriate responses to us via [mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com email].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Assistant IA &amp;quot;T-3001&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:KI-Assistent &amp;quot;T-3001&amp;quot;]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=AI_Assistant_%22T-3001%22&amp;diff=29410</id>
		<title>AI Assistant &quot;T-3001&quot;</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=AI_Assistant_%22T-3001%22&amp;diff=29410"/>
		<updated>2026-03-20T10:13:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version V34, the AI assistant named “T-3001” is available in the bottom-right corner of the TARGET interface as a chatbot to answer your questions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:KI-AssistentT-3001.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 1: Ki-Assistent &amp;quot;T-3001&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also call “T-3001” without TARGET [https://office.ibfriedrich.com/chatBot/T-3001en.html here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please enter your questions about using TARGET 3001! The more specific your question is, the higher the chance of getting a useful answer. If you notice that “T-3001” doesn’t understand your question correctly or gives an unhelpful answer, simply enter your email address in the input field below and press [Return]. The chat history will then be forwarded directly to the TARGET team and promptly answered by a human via email as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The AI assistant “T-3001” is still in training and may provide incorrect or even dangerous answers. Users must always first verify the plausibility of every answer! The questions and answers are processed by an external artificial intelligence (AI) system. The questions and answers are stored on our servers for one week.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, do not include any private or confidential information in your inquiries. Please report any incorrect or inappropriate responses to us via [mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com email].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Assistant IA &amp;quot;T-3001&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:KI-Assistent &amp;quot;T-3001&amp;quot;]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=TARGET_3001!_Viewer&amp;diff=29409</id>
		<title>TARGET 3001! Viewer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=TARGET_3001!_Viewer&amp;diff=29409"/>
		<updated>2026-03-19T11:59:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Use the TARGET 3001! viewer for inspection. Hand it over to your customers/partners to present, evaluate and discuss your projects!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:viewer-350.png|Link=https://www.ibfriedrich.com/target/v34/english/tarv34viewer_e.exe|Viewer|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[https://www.ibfriedrich.com/target/v34/english/tarv34viewer_e.exe Download]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;- lots of functions active&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;- no installation required&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;- commercial use allowed&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;- Gerber export driver active, some others not&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;- no library/data base access&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;- no simulation&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;- no save&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;- copy and paste without paste&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:viewer.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The viewer property is indicated in the opening image.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:TARGET 3001! Viewer]][[fr:TARGET 3001! Viewer]][[Category:About TARGET 3001!]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Scaling.jpg&amp;diff=29402</id>
		<title>File:Scaling.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Scaling.jpg&amp;diff=29402"/>
		<updated>2026-03-16T16:28:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: Harald Friedrich uploaded a new version of File:Scaling.jpg&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Screen_resolution_-_Pixels_-_Scaling_-_Blurry&amp;diff=29401</id>
		<title>Screen resolution - Pixels - Scaling - Blurry</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Screen_resolution_-_Pixels_-_Scaling_-_Blurry&amp;diff=29401"/>
		<updated>2026-03-16T16:27:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with &#039;&#039;&#039;V34&#039;&#039;&#039;, TARGET itself can scale all its dialogs automatically. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with a very high resolution), TARGET will automatically enlarge its interface and dialogs. This makes them easy to handle and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Scaling.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Figure 1: Windows scaling, here 125%)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If the screen resolution of TARGET is too high or too low, or if text elements appear too large, too small, or blurry/washed out, it may be helpful to find the settings that Windows uses for TARGET:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:High dpi.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Résolution d&#039;écran - Pixels - Mise à l&#039;échelle - Affichage flou]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Auflösung - Bildschirmauflösung - Resolution - Pixel - Skalierung]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Current_topics&amp;diff=29400</id>
		<title>Current topics</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Current_topics&amp;diff=29400"/>
		<updated>2026-03-16T12:08:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Dear TARGET 3001! user,&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v34/en/index.html V34] is available. We are pleased that the development of TARGET goes on continuously. There are no changes in our license and product policy. The transition from V33 (or older) to V34 is a paid update for which we offer low update prices. All further development of TARGET 3001! now flows into V34, all updates within your V34 are free. See TARGET menu Help/Free Update. Look below for all highlights, the complete list of new features please find in the [https://www.ibfriedrich.com/target/english/logbook.txt LOGBOOK]. If you would like to go for the V34 - our shop is open:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border =&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing =&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;30&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Yours sincerely,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Harald Friedrich&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;and the TARGET 3001! Team&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:Cartbutton75.png|link=https://shop.ibfriedrich.com|...to the Shop]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[https://shop.ibfriedrich.com to the SHOP]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:V33-logo-wiki.png|link=https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v33/en/index.html]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;RELEASE OF OUR NEW VERSION V33&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Discover all new [https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v33/en/index.html Features] of our new Version at a glance.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:V32-logo-wiki.png|link=https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v32/en/index.html]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;RELEASE OF OUR NEW VERSION V32&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Discover all new [https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v32/en/index.html Features] of our new Version at a glance.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:V31-logo-wiki.png|link=https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v31/en/index.html]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;RELEASE OF OUR NEW VERSION V31&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Discover all new [https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v31/en/index.html Features] of our new Version at a glance.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:gbrx3logo.jpg|GerberX3 ready]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since March 2021:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Gerber data: [[Gerber#Gerber_X2|Gerber X2 and Gerber X3 implemented]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;GenCAD: [[GenCAD|New functions added.  DFM approved.]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Differential Pairs: Easier to create, quicker to connect.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:ligament.jpg|Panel with bars]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since January 2021:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Panel: [[Panel#Leave_bars_like_predefined_breaking_points|Set a Panel outline together with bars inbetween the individual boards]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Multiline Text: Performance improved&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:aktuelles_snapeda.jpg|SnapEDA|link=SnapEDA]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since November 2020:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[SnapEDA|SnapEDA]]: Interface with SnapEDA. Component not found in TARGET? Load it from SnapEDA. 3D models too!&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Convergence-pad|Covergence pad]]: Make any pad a convergence pad. Improve the quality of hand soldered junctions significantly. It&#039;s amazing!&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:v30_logo-160.png|TARGET 3001! V30]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;New V30:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Autorouter#Pilot_Router|Pilot Router]]: Direct the path of a track by hovering the cursor tip, a click makes the Pilot Router complete it.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Give a track a certain length by [[Meander_a_track#Meander_interactively|interactive meandering]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Signal_classes#Special_distances_to_other_signal_classes|Signal classes can keep special distances between each other]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Tooltip]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; shows all elements superposed at cursor position&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Huge 3D-STEP models can be used at [[STEP_3D_Import#Reduce_the_complexity_of_a_STEP_model|reduced complexity]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Select#Enlarge_selection_by_.5BShift.5D_and_.5BM1.5D|Selecting with [Shift] + [M1]]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; also works through nodes and vias&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Track#Streamline_a_track|Track fine tuning:]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Press [7] to optimize and streamline the selected track segments&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Component buttons in the sidebar collect your favorite parts in their context menu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Signal_polygon#Suppress_ligaments_in_thermals|Exclude pads for heat sinks:]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; For solder pads and vias the generation of ridges for heat sinks can be suppressed individually&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:v20_160.png|TARGET 3001! V20]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;News in V20:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Push&amp;amp;Shove]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: When routing a new track, neighboring tracks are pushed aside, if necessary.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Neighbors of the neighbor follow like a cascade. Spacing rules are obeyed.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Move vertices to the grid/add any point to the grid&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Push&amp;amp;Shove has put some tracks out of the grid? No problem:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drag vertices back to the grid by adding the [Shift] key. Or you would generate additional grid points just at the spot where you are.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Component drag and drop from&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;  [https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php/Samacsys SamacSys®]  and  [https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php/Ultra_Librarian UltraLibrarian®]&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Selecting track segments&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: With [Shift] and [Ctrl] as usual in Windows select either &amp;quot;all inbetween&amp;quot; or just the first and last highlighted track segment.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Design Rule Check&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: The check for minimum spacings was significantly accelerated.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Airwires_/_Ratsnest#Number_of_air_wires|Air wires]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Number of air wires - A useful little feature to plan and calculate you routing activities.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:Builder_Bildmarke.jpg|Builder]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since June 2018:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Signal_polygon#Show_or_hide_polygons_upon_visible_layers|Signal polygons]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Show or hide signal polygons using keys [&amp;lt;] and [&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/c-builder/index.html Builder]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: COMPONIVERSE extended by the web-based component editor &amp;quot;BUILDER&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Backup#Autosaves|Autosaves]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Up to nine renewing autosaves possible instead of only three&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Gerber_Special#Gerber_file_name.2C_Gerber_file_extension|GerberSpecial]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: XGerber: Standard Gerber file extensions can be chosen&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Printing script format]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Printing by scripts now possible in format *.pdf too&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:news160.png|News]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since November 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[MID_Tutorial#Rotation.2C_Position.2C_Dimension|MID-Edition]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: A click top left upon the &amp;quot;standard orientation&amp;quot;-icon shows the measurements of the MID-body at the bottom left&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Signal_polygon#Use_the_entire_PCB_area|Groundplane]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Item &amp;quot;Entire PCB area&amp;quot; added to menu &amp;quot;Actions/Ground planes&amp;quot;. Use the entire PCB area as a signal polygon.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Component_properties#Reload_properties_from_a_CSV_file|Component browser]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Properties: Item &amp;quot;Reload properties from a CSV file&amp;quot; added&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Component_properties#Create_components_from_a_CSV_file|Component browser]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Component: Item &amp;quot;Generate component from a CSV file&amp;quot; added&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:fraesen_160.png|Predefine tools|link=Engraving_insulation_channels#Start_output]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since October 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Engraving_insulation_channels#Pick_engraver_tools_from_a_jacket_according_to_a_list|Isolation milling]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Tools can be allocated picking them from their place in a jacket.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:polygon160.png|Polygonal ground planes|link=Signal_polygon]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Signal_polygon|Polygonal ground planes]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Any filled polygon on a copper layer can be furnished with a signal. Each can be handled like a separate ground plane. It can individually be furnished with attributes. On one copper layer any number of polygons with different signals can be drawn.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:stueckliste160.png|Boost your BoM|link=Bill_of_Material_BOM#The_list_of_the_BoM]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Bill_of_Material_BOM#The_list_of_the_BoM|Boost your BoM]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Bill of material (BoM): If you add a certain property to a part and you also add the leading characters &amp;quot;BOM-&amp;quot;, this particular property automatically will appear in the BoM.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:fraesen160.png|Engraving bit calculator|link=Engraving_insulation_channels#Copper_top]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Engraving_insulation_channels#Copper_top|Engraving bit calculator]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Insulation milling: In insulation milling copper tracks are circumscribed by an engraving bit. The width of the rubout depends on the angle of its tip and its immersion depth. Calculate these parameters quickly by the use of the Engraving bit calculator in menu &amp;quot;Engraving Insulation channels&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:dukoZaun160.jpg|Via fence|link=Via fence]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Via fence]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Signal tracks can on both sides be fenced by a chain of vias. High frequency signals by this means can be shielded from external electromagnetic influence.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:lochraster160.png|Breadboard|link=Breadboard]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Breadboard]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Polygonale breadboard area: Create any polygonal breadboard area in your layout. Hples have the property of a via. You may edit each afterwards or give it a signal. But this is no must. By means of such breadboard areas you easily create &amp;quot;creativity buffers&amp;quot; for your design. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:password160.png|Password protection|link=Password_protection]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Password_protection]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Protect your project from third party access by the use of a password. But not only a project can be protected: All projects, being created by your license can automatically be protected by a &amp;quot;licence password&amp;quot;. This one is demanded if one of your projects shall be opened by a TARGET öicense other than yours. So you protect your intellectual property from third party access. Also a &amp;quot;drift off&amp;quot; towards the spheres of your competitors will be avoided.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:pdf160.png|Instant PDF|link=PDF_creation]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[PDF_creation|Instant PDF]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Create a PDF file of your circuit diagram or PCB without a PDF printer. Achieve a quick transfer of your designs as a PDF. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:componiverse_n.jpg|160px|COMPONIVERSE®: New engine, new look, new features|link=https://www.ibfriedrich.com/en/componiverse_introduction/index.html]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since September 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Componiverse|COMPONIVERSE®]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: The interactive component cloud of the  TARGET 3001! community. Load up your components and download the ones others have uploaded.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The TARGET 3001! component exchange. New engine, new look, new features.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:onequestion_n_e.jpg|160px|One question: Ask a question to a certain issue]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since September 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[One question...|Ask a question]]: TARGET 3001! internal FAQ system. Correlates to the TARGET dialog from which the question has been asked.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:samacsys_n.jpg|160px|SamacSys: Cooperation with component portal]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since September 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Components of the British component portal [[Samacsys|SamacSys]] can instantly be overtaken to TARGET 3001!. Select components found and place them by drag and drop to your TARGET 3001!-design. Free software &amp;quot;Library Loader&amp;quot; required.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:pickplaceprop.jpg|160px|Pick and place: Individual properties can be processed. Here: STOCK_NO and BOX_NO]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
* Pick and place: Individual properties can be processed. In this example it&#039;s the properties: STOCK_NO and BOX_NO.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:cappedvia.jpg|160px|Plugged and capped vias]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since July 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
* Introduced &amp;quot;Plugged&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Capped&amp;quot; for vias and pads (e.g. for thermal vias)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:PinTextfunktionSignalname.jpg|160px|Signal name as text function]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since July 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Pin names in schematic symbols can also have the signal name as text function (e.g. for a RS232 D-sub 9)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; margin-right:2px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:polygonalepads.jpg|160px|Polygonale Pads]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since June 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Polygonal pads: Increased visible resolution&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; margin-right:2px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:ToolbarpaletteLeiterbahn.jpg|160px|Leiterbahnvorlagen]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since June 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Toolbar: Palette &amp;quot;Tracks&amp;quot;: Programmed buttons also affect tracks yet to come&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; margin-right:2px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:Symbolgeneratoralfanumerisch.jpg|160px|Pin names alphanumerical]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since May 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Symbol generator: Pin numbers also alphanumerical (A1, A2 ... B1 ...)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; margin-right:2px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:2x2meter.jpg|160px|2 by 2 meters drawing area]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since April 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum area now 2m x 2m or 6.5ft x 6.5ft.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:NeuesBtlErstellenDlg_e.jpg|120px|Component editor]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since March 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
* Component editor: Get a new component quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
* Offers subsequently the automatic functions needed. &lt;br /&gt;
* A new symbol and/or package can be derived from existing ones!&lt;br /&gt;
* See menu: Components/Create a new component...&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:RectangleByCoordinates.jpg|120px|Rectangle]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since March 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* New tool for a quicker design of rectangles.&lt;br /&gt;
* Simply enter mesurements in cm or coordinates.&lt;br /&gt;
* Drag from the center or from the side.&lt;br /&gt;
* See drawing functions [[image:RechteckKoordIcon.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; margin-right:2px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:TextTag_e.jpg|120px|TextTag]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since March 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Text Tag offering useful textfunctions.&lt;br /&gt;
* Place comments, advice, notes of any kind to schematic or layout&lt;br /&gt;
* See drawing functions  [[image:TextTagIcon.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;read more in the [https://www.ibfriedrich.com/target/english/logbook.txt TARGET 3001! LOGBOOK]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:homepage]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Thèmes actuels]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Aktuelles]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Current_topics&amp;diff=29399</id>
		<title>Current topics</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Current_topics&amp;diff=29399"/>
		<updated>2026-03-16T12:08:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Dear TARGET 3001! user,&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v34/en/index.html V34] is available. We are pleased that the development of TARGET goes on continuously. There are no changes in our license and product policy. The transition from V33 (or older) to V34 is a paid update for which we offer low update prices. All further development of TARGET 3001! now flows into V34, all updates within your V34 are free. See TARGET menu Help/Free Update. Look below for all highlights, the complete list of new features please find in the [https://www.ibfriedrich.com/target/english/logbook.txt LOGBOOK]. If you would like to go for the V34 - our shop is open:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border =&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing =&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;30&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Yours sincerely,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Harald Friedrich&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;and the TARGET 3001! Team&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:Cartbutton75.png|link=https://shop.ibfriedrich.com|...to the Shop]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[https://shop.ibfriedrich.com to the SHOP]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:V33-logo-wiki.png|link=https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v33/en/index.html]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;RELEASE OF OUR NEW VERSION V33&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Discover all new [https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v33/en/index.html Features] of our new Version at a glance.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:V32-logo-wiki.png|link=https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v32/en/index.html]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;RELEASE OF OUR NEW VERSION V32&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Discover all new [https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v32/en/index.html Features] of our new Version at a glance.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:V31-logo-wiki.png|link=https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v31/en/index.html]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;RELEASE OF OUR NEW VERSION V31&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Discover all new [https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v31/en/index.html Features] of our new Version at a glance.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:gbrx3logo.jpg|GerberX3 ready]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since March 2021:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Gerber data: [[Gerber#Gerber_X2|Gerber X2 and Gerber X3 implemented]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;GenCAD: [[GenCAD|New functions added.  DFM approved.]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Differential Pairs: Easier to create, quicker to connect.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:ligament.jpg|Panel with bars]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since January 2021:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Panel: [[Panel#Leave_bars_like_predefined_breaking_points|Set a Panel outline together with bars inbetween the individual boards]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Multiline Text: Performance improved&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:aktuelles_snapeda.jpg|SnapEDA|link=SnapEDA]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since November 2020:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[SnapEDA|SnapEDA]]: Interface with SnapEDA. Component not found in TARGET? Load it from SnapEDA. 3D models too!&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Convergence-pad|Covergence pad]]: Make any pad a convergence pad. Improve the quality of hand soldered junctions significantly. It&#039;s amazing!&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:v30_logo-160.png|TARGET 3001! V30]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;New V30:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Autorouter#Pilot_Router|Pilot Router]]: Direct the path of a track by hovering the cursor tip, a click makes the Pilot Router complete it.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Give a track a certain length by [[Meander_a_track#Meander_interactively|interactive meandering]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Signal_classes#Special_distances_to_other_signal_classes|Signal classes can keep special distances between each other]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Tooltip]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; shows all elements superposed at cursor position&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Huge 3D-STEP models can be used at [[STEP_3D_Import#Reduce_the_complexity_of_a_STEP_model|reduced complexity]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Select#Enlarge_selection_by_.5BShift.5D_and_.5BM1.5D|Selecting with [Shift] + [M1]]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; also works through nodes and vias&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Track#Streamline_a_track|Track fine tuning:]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Press [7] to optimize and streamline the selected track segments&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Component buttons in the sidebar collect your favorite parts in their context menu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Signal_polygon#Suppress_ligaments_in_thermals|Exclude pads for heat sinks:]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; For solder pads and vias the generation of ridges for heat sinks can be suppressed individually&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:v20_160.png|TARGET 3001! V20]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;News in V20:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Push&amp;amp;Shove]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: When routing a new track, neighboring tracks are pushed aside, if necessary.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Neighbors of the neighbor follow like a cascade. Spacing rules are obeyed.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Move vertices to the grid/add any point to the grid&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Push&amp;amp;Shove has put some tracks out of the grid? No problem:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drag vertices back to the grid by adding the [Shift] key. Or you would generate additional grid points just at the spot where you are.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Component drag and drop from&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;  [https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php/Samacsys SamacSys®]  and  [https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php/Ultra_Librarian UltraLibrarian®]&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Selecting track segments&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: With [Shift] and [Ctrl] as usual in Windows select either &amp;quot;all inbetween&amp;quot; or just the first and last highlighted track segment.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Design Rule Check&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: The check for minimum spacings was significantly accelerated.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Airwires_/_Ratsnest#Number_of_air_wires|Air wires]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Number of air wires - A useful little feature to plan and calculate you routing activities.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:Builder_Bildmarke.jpg|Builder]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since June 2018:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Signal_polygon#Show_or_hide_polygons_upon_visible_layers|Signal polygons]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Show or hide signal polygons using keys [&amp;lt;] and [&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/c-builder/index.html Builder]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: COMPONIVERSE extended by the web-based component editor &amp;quot;BUILDER&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Backup#Autosaves|Autosaves]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Up to nine renewing autosaves possible instead of only three&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Gerber_Special#Gerber_file_name.2C_Gerber_file_extension|GerberSpecial]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: XGerber: Standard Gerber file extensions can be chosen&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Printing script format]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Printing by scripts now possible in format *.pdf too&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:news160.png|News]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since November 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[MID_Tutorial#Rotation.2C_Position.2C_Dimension|MID-Edition]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: A click top left upon the &amp;quot;standard orientation&amp;quot;-icon shows the measurements of the MID-body at the bottom left&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Signal_polygon#Use_the_entire_PCB_area|Groundplane]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Item &amp;quot;Entire PCB area&amp;quot; added to menu &amp;quot;Actions/Ground planes&amp;quot;. Use the entire PCB area as a signal polygon.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Component_properties#Reload_properties_from_a_CSV_file|Component browser]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Properties: Item &amp;quot;Reload properties from a CSV file&amp;quot; added&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Component_properties#Create_components_from_a_CSV_file|Component browser]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Component: Item &amp;quot;Generate component from a CSV file&amp;quot; added&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:fraesen_160.png|Predefine tools|link=Engraving_insulation_channels#Start_output]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since October 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Engraving_insulation_channels#Pick_engraver_tools_from_a_jacket_according_to_a_list|Isolation milling]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Tools can be allocated picking them from their place in a jacket.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:polygon160.png|Polygonal ground planes|link=Signal_polygon]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Signal_polygon|Polygonal ground planes]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Any filled polygon on a copper layer can be furnished with a signal. Each can be handled like a separate ground plane. It can individually be furnished with attributes. On one copper layer any number of polygons with different signals can be drawn.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:stueckliste160.png|Boost your BoM|link=Bill_of_Material_BOM#The_list_of_the_BoM]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Bill_of_Material_BOM#The_list_of_the_BoM|Boost your BoM]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Bill of material (BoM): If you add a certain property to a part and you also add the leading characters &amp;quot;BOM-&amp;quot;, this particular property automatically will appear in the BoM.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:fraesen160.png|Engraving bit calculator|link=Engraving_insulation_channels#Copper_top]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Engraving_insulation_channels#Copper_top|Engraving bit calculator]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Insulation milling: In insulation milling copper tracks are circumscribed by an engraving bit. The width of the rubout depends on the angle of its tip and its immersion depth. Calculate these parameters quickly by the use of the Engraving bit calculator in menu &amp;quot;Engraving Insulation channels&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:dukoZaun160.jpg|Via fence|link=Via fence]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Via fence]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Signal tracks can on both sides be fenced by a chain of vias. High frequency signals by this means can be shielded from external electromagnetic influence.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:lochraster160.png|Breadboard|link=Breadboard]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Breadboard]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Polygonale breadboard area: Create any polygonal breadboard area in your layout. Hples have the property of a via. You may edit each afterwards or give it a signal. But this is no must. By means of such breadboard areas you easily create &amp;quot;creativity buffers&amp;quot; for your design. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:password160.png|Password protection|link=Password_protection]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Password_protection]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Protect your project from third party access by the use of a password. But not only a project can be protected: All projects, being created by your license can automatically be protected by a &amp;quot;licence password&amp;quot;. This one is demanded if one of your projects shall be opened by a TARGET öicense other than yours. So you protect your intellectual property from third party access. Also a &amp;quot;drift off&amp;quot; towards the spheres of your competitors will be avoided.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:pdf160.png|Instant PDF|link=PDF_creation]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[PDF_creation|Instant PDF]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Create a PDF file of your circuit diagram or PCB without a PDF printer. Achieve a quick transfer of your designs as a PDF. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:componiverse_n.jpg|160px|COMPONIVERSE®: New engine, new look, new features|link=https://www.ibfriedrich.com/en/componiverse_introduction/index.html]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since September 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Componiverse|COMPONIVERSE®]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: The interactive component cloud of the  TARGET 3001! community. Load up your components and download the ones others have uploaded.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The TARGET 3001! component exchange. New engine, new look, new features.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:onequestion_n_e.jpg|160px|One question: Ask a question to a certain issue]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since September 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[One question...|Ask a question]]: TARGET 3001! internal FAQ system. Correlates to the TARGET dialog from which the question has been asked.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:samacsys_n.jpg|160px|SamacSys: Cooperation with component portal]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since September 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Components of the British component portal [[Samacsys|SamacSys]] can instantly be overtaken to TARGET 3001!. Select components found and place them by drag and drop to your TARGET 3001!-design. Free software &amp;quot;Library Loader&amp;quot; required.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:pickplaceprop.jpg|160px|Pick and place: Individual properties can be processed. Here: STOCK_NO and BOX_NO]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
* Pick and place: Individual properties can be processed. In this example it&#039;s the properties: STOCK_NO and BOX_NO.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:cappedvia.jpg|160px|Plugged and capped vias]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since July 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
* Introduced &amp;quot;Plugged&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Capped&amp;quot; for vias and pads (e.g. for thermal vias)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:PinTextfunktionSignalname.jpg|160px|Signal name as text function]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since July 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Pin names in schematic symbols can also have the signal name as text function (e.g. for a RS232 D-sub 9)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; margin-right:2px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:polygonalepads.jpg|160px|Polygonale Pads]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since June 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Polygonal pads: Increased visible resolution&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; margin-right:2px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:ToolbarpaletteLeiterbahn.jpg|160px|Leiterbahnvorlagen]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since June 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Toolbar: Palette &amp;quot;Tracks&amp;quot;: Programmed buttons also affect tracks yet to come&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; margin-right:2px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:Symbolgeneratoralfanumerisch.jpg|160px|Pin names alphanumerical]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since May 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Symbol generator: Pin numbers also alphanumerical (A1, A2 ... B1 ...)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; margin-right:2px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:2x2meter.jpg|160px|2 by 2 meters drawing area]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since April 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum area now 2m x 2m or 6.5ft x 6.5ft.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:NeuesBtlErstellenDlg_e.jpg|120px|Component editor]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since March 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
* Component editor: Get a new component quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
* Offers subsequently the automatic functions needed. &lt;br /&gt;
* A new symbol and/or package can be derived from existing ones!&lt;br /&gt;
* See menu: Components/Create a new component...&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:RectangleByCoordinates.jpg|120px|Rectangle]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since March 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* New tool for a quicker design of rectangles.&lt;br /&gt;
* Simply enter mesurements in cm or coordinates.&lt;br /&gt;
* Drag from the center or from the side.&lt;br /&gt;
* See drawing functions [[image:RechteckKoordIcon.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; margin-right:2px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:TextTag_e.jpg|120px|TextTag]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since March 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Text Tag offering useful textfunctions.&lt;br /&gt;
* Place comments, advice, notes of any kind to schematic or layout&lt;br /&gt;
* See drawing functions  [[image:TextTagIcon.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;read more in the [https://www.ibfriedrich.com/target/english/logbook.txt TARGET 3001! LOGBOOK]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:homepage]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Aktuelles]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Thèmes actuels]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29398</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29398"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T18:48:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;[OK]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [Enter] to place the text.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter Omega for Ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field to capital letters or lowercase letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use &amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Times New Roman.&amp;quot; These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; &amp;quot;Segoe UI&amp;quot; is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts &amp;quot;TARGET&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;DIN-ISO-ANSI&amp;quot; are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts &amp;quot;TARGET&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;DIN-ISO-ANSI&amp;quot; are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the &amp;quot;Up Arrow&amp;quot; button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font Height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font Width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (=Point)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Thickness&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the &amp;quot;TARGET&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;DIN-ISO-ANSI&amp;quot; fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Rotation&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [r]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Stiff&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [r]]] later on, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text even upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a conducting element and a potential ground plane. This spacing width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a &amp;quot;rectangle.&amp;quot; You can determine when this point is reached in the &amp;quot;[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]&amp;quot; dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Function&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; can be &amp;quot;Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variables. The following variable types can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., NE555, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, icons, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of Unicode characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click to directly access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field of the text dialog. You can also do a double-click [[M11]] on a character below in the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also include links to Internet content (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into texts, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., &amp;quot;Z:\directory\file.xyz,&amp;quot; as well as file paths in UNC format: &amp;quot;\\server\directory\file.xyz&amp;quot; or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: &amp;quot;&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de&amp;quot; .The user is then asked whether he wants to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with &#039;&#039;&#039;V34&#039;&#039;&#039;, TARGET itself can scale all its dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with a very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger scale. This makes them easier to handle and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29397</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29397"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T18:47:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Elements of the Text dialog */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;[OK]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [Enter] to place the text.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter Omega for Ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field to capital letters or lowercase letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use &amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Times New Roman.&amp;quot; These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; &amp;quot;Segoe UI&amp;quot; is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts &amp;quot;TARGET&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;DIN-ISO-ANSI&amp;quot; are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts &amp;quot;TARGET&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;DIN-ISO-ANSI&amp;quot; are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the &amp;quot;Up Arrow&amp;quot; button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font Height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font Width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (=Point)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Thickness&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the &amp;quot;TARGET&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;DIN-ISO-ANSI&amp;quot; fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Rotation&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [r]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Stiff&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [r]]] later on, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text even upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a conducting element and a potential ground plane. This spacing width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a &amp;quot;rectangle.&amp;quot; You can determine when this point is reached in the &amp;quot;[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]&amp;quot; dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Function&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; can be &amp;quot;Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variables. The following variable types can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., NE555, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, icons, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of Unicode characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click to directly access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field of the text dialog. You can also do a double-click [[M11]] on a character below in the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also include links to Internet content (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into texts, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., &amp;quot;Z:\directory\file.xyz,&amp;quot; as well as file paths in UNC format: &amp;quot;\\server\directory\file.xyz&amp;quot; or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: &amp;quot;&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de&amp;quot; .The user is then asked whether he wants to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with &#039;&#039;&#039;V34&#039;&#039;&#039;, TARGET itself can scale all its dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with a very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger scale. This makes them easier to handle and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29396</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29396"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T18:13:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Elements of the Text dialog */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;[OK]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [Enter] to place the text.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter Omega for Ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field to capital letters or lowercase letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use &amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Times New Roman.&amp;quot; These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; &amp;quot;Segoe UI&amp;quot; is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts &amp;quot;TARGET&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;DIN-ISO-ANSI&amp;quot; are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts &amp;quot;TARGET&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;DIN-ISO-ANSI&amp;quot; are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the &amp;quot;Up Arrow&amp;quot; button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the &amp;quot;TARGET&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;DIN-ISO-ANSI&amp;quot; fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Fixed&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a &amp;quot;rectangle.&amp;quot; You can determine when this point is reached in the &amp;quot;[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]&amp;quot; dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, icons, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of Unicode characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click to directly access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field of the text dialog. You can also do a double-click [[M11]] on a character below in the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also include links to Internet content (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into texts, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., &amp;quot;Z:\directory\file.xyz,&amp;quot; as well as file paths in UNC format: &amp;quot;\\server\directory\file.xyz&amp;quot; or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: &amp;quot;&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de&amp;quot; .The user is then asked whether he wants to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with &#039;&#039;&#039;V34&#039;&#039;&#039;, TARGET itself can scale all its dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with a very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger scale. This makes them easier to handle and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29395</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29395"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T18:09:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Elements of the Text dialog */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;[OK]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [Enter] to place the text.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter Omega for Ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field to capital letters or lowercase letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, icons, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of Unicode characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click to directly access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field of the text dialog. You can also do a double-click [[M11]] on a character below in the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also include links to Internet content (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into texts, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., &amp;quot;Z:\directory\file.xyz,&amp;quot; as well as file paths in UNC format: &amp;quot;\\server\directory\file.xyz&amp;quot; or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: &amp;quot;&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de&amp;quot; .The user is then asked whether he wants to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with &#039;&#039;&#039;V34&#039;&#039;&#039;, TARGET itself can scale all its dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with a very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger scale. This makes them easier to handle and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29394</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29394"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T18:08:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Elements of the Text dialog */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;[OK]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [Enter] to place the text.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter Omega for Ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, icons, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of Unicode characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click to directly access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field of the text dialog. You can also do a double-click [[M11]] on a character below in the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also include links to Internet content (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into texts, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., &amp;quot;Z:\directory\file.xyz,&amp;quot; as well as file paths in UNC format: &amp;quot;\\server\directory\file.xyz&amp;quot; or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: &amp;quot;&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de&amp;quot; .The user is then asked whether he wants to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with &#039;&#039;&#039;V34&#039;&#039;&#039;, TARGET itself can scale all its dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with a very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger scale. This makes them easier to handle and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29393</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29393"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T18:05:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;[OK]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [Enter] to place the text.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, icons, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of Unicode characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click to directly access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field of the text dialog. You can also do a double-click [[M11]] on a character below in the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also include links to Internet content (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into texts, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., &amp;quot;Z:\directory\file.xyz,&amp;quot; as well as file paths in UNC format: &amp;quot;\\server\directory\file.xyz&amp;quot; or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: &amp;quot;&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de&amp;quot; .The user is then asked whether he wants to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with &#039;&#039;&#039;V34&#039;&#039;&#039;, TARGET itself can scale all its dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with a very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger scale. This makes them easier to handle and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Screen_resolution_-_Pixels_-_Scaling_-_Blurry&amp;diff=29392</id>
		<title>Screen resolution - Pixels - Scaling - Blurry</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Screen_resolution_-_Pixels_-_Scaling_-_Blurry&amp;diff=29392"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T18:02:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with &#039;&#039;&#039;V34&#039;&#039;&#039;, TARGET itself can scale all its dialogs automatically. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with a very high resolution), TARGET will automatically enlarge its interface and dialogs. This makes them easy to handle and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Scaling.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
(Figure 1: Windows scaling, here 125%)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If the screen resolution of TARGET is too high or too low, or if text elements appear too large, too small, or blurry/washed out, it may be helpful to find the settings that Windows uses for TARGET:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:High dpi.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Résolution d&#039;écran - Pixels - Mise à l&#039;échelle - Affichage flou]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Auflösung - Bildschirmauflösung - Resolution - Pixel - Skalierung]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29391</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29391"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T18:00:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Font blurred, image unsharp */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, icons, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of Unicode characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click to directly access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field of the text dialog. You can also do a double-click [[M11]] on a character below in the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also include links to Internet content (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into texts, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., &amp;quot;Z:\directory\file.xyz,&amp;quot; as well as file paths in UNC format: &amp;quot;\\server\directory\file.xyz&amp;quot; or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: &amp;quot;&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de&amp;quot; .The user is then asked whether he wants to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with &#039;&#039;&#039;V34&#039;&#039;&#039;, TARGET itself can scale all its dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with a very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger scale. This makes them easier to handle and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29390</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29390"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:55:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Internet links and links to files */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, icons, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of Unicode characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click to directly access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field of the text dialog. You can also do a double-click [[M11]] on a character below in the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also include links to Internet content (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into texts, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., &amp;quot;Z:\directory\file.xyz,&amp;quot; as well as file paths in UNC format: &amp;quot;\\server\directory\file.xyz&amp;quot; or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: &amp;quot;&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de&amp;quot; .The user is then asked whether he wants to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29389</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29389"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:49:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Unicode special chars and foreign languages */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, icons, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of Unicode characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click to directly access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field of the text dialog. You can also do a double-click [[M11]] on a character below in the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29388</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29388"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:46:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Unicode special chars and foreign languages */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, icons, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of Unicode characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29387</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29387"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:44:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Unicode special chars and foreign languages */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, icons, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Context_menu&amp;diff=29386</id>
		<title>Context menu</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Context_menu&amp;diff=29386"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:42:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;By clicking the right mousekey &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M2]]&#039;&#039;&#039; a context menu opens which allows to set several properties.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The context menu  in schematic and layout differs only by the entries &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Page&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Layers&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:kontextS_e.jpg]]||[[Image:kontextL_e.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;The context menu in schematic view&#039;&#039;&#039;||&#039;&#039;&#039;The context menu in layout view&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Module&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please have a look in the [[Module]] article&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can create a new (additional) schematic [[Page|page]] or manouvre between the pages&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layers&#039;&#039;&#039;: The dialog &amp;quot;[[Layer|PCB layers]]&amp;quot; opens. It shows the current layer configuration and allows all layer settings.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Grid&#039;&#039;&#039;: The dialog [[Grid|Window grid]] allows all grid settings as well as the preferred drawing unit (metric or imperial). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Simulationmodel&#039;&#039;&#039;: After an Info-box the dialog &amp;quot;Models for ...&amp;quot; opens. You can edit the [[Simulation]]model of the component selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit properties&#039;&#039;&#039;: A component needs to be highlighted for edition. The dialog  [[Edit|&amp;quot;Edit the selected elements&amp;quot;]] opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, selected text can also be aligned:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:AlignTexts.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Left-aligned, right-aligned or aligned horizontally)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When aligning to the left, the text that starts furthest to the left is used as a reference. When aligning to the right, the text that ends furthest to the right is used as a reference. If you want to align to the top, the text located furthest at the top is used as a reference. When aligning to the left or right, TARGET will then ask whether the texts should be distributed evenly vertically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At least two text elements must be selected for the menu item to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Menus]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr: Menu contextuelle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Kontextmenü]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Measure&amp;diff=29385</id>
		<title>Measure</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Measure&amp;diff=29385"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:39:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Dimensioning angles and radii */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by key &#039;&#039;&#039;[u]&#039;&#039;&#039;,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Measure and dimensioning&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; in &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Menu Actions]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
or by the tool [[Image:Measure.jpg]] under the icon [[Image:edit.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
with &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M12]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a quick information the little info box might be sufficient. It is fixed to the cursor as soon as you press the [u]-key for meas&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;u&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ring:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:messen_box_e.jpg|none|Infobox at &amp;quot;measure&amp;quot;]]Image: Infobox at &amp;quot;measure&amp;quot;. The mouse pointer was moved after pressing the [u] key from the red border in the north over the white to the south to the opposite red border. The black line shows the distance.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It means: L=Length of the air wire of the measurement, M=Manhattan Metric= dY+dX, Phi=Angle measured from the starting point of the measurement, started at 15:00 (= 0°) counterclockwise.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Measure and dimensioning ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status line shows the x- and y-portions of the distance (dx and dy), the distance itself (L) and the Manhattan-length (M=dx+dy). When drawing tracks also see the signal length (S). You might switch off the grid for a short time with &#039;&#039;&#039;[F6]&#039;&#039;&#039; to measure very exactly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a dimensioning by pressing...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure1.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &#039;&#039;&#039;...[u]&#039;&#039;&#039; at the starting point&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure2.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   ...and a mouseclick &#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a distance.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure3.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   Now hover the mouse orthogonally to open area and click again.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure4.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   Confirm the opening dialog...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure5.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   ...and see the digits of the dimensioning on your layout or schematic.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit the digits like normal text (doubleclick on it or single click and &#039;&#039;&#039;[e]&#039;&#039;&#039; for edit, then follow the dialog).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tolerances and alternative unit ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Measure4.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 34, you can also specify tolerances and select a second unit in parentheses. If the plus and minus tolerances are identical, TARGET combines them into a single ± value. The following result is displayed:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Measure5.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Entering non measure values ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you enter a different value to the measure dialog box than the one given, e.g. 4.00m instead of 8.255mm, the value is marked by an underscore. This is to indicate that the figure shown is not the one measured by scale but a different figure, entered following the idea of the layouter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:realmassDEF.jpg|none]]Image: The value entered does not represent the real length of the line but a individual value chosen by the designer. indicated by underscore.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Finding coordinates that are not on the grid ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to measure things that are not on the grid, use the [+] key to find these points. Look [[Coordinates|here]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning the drills of the complete layout ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning1.jpg|none]]Find it in menu &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; on the bottom of the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning2.jpg|none]]First you get asked from which diameter the dimensioning shall be displayed. Here we want to have all dimensions from drills bigger than 1.3 mm (included)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning3.jpg|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
That is how it comes out. The digits can be edited like any text.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning using a snap point ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the function &amp;quot;Measure and dimensioning&amp;quot; from menu &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot;. In the status bar you can read &amp;quot;Measure from...&amp;quot;. Hover the mouse close to the starting point but you don&#039;t click. Instead you press keyboard key [+]  Now you can choose from significant points nearby by the use of the keyboard keys &amp;quot;up&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;down&amp;quot; in order to determine the desired snap point. The cursor follows. Press key &amp;quot;Return&amp;quot; for OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In respect to the target coordinate you do exactly the same: move the mouse close to the measuring target. No click! Press key [+], select the point of interest using the arrow keys and press [Return]. Now you only need to decide where to put the measuring arrow (an element of technical drawing). Done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning angles and radii ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of V33, you can also dimension angles and radii very easily:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WinkelUndRadien.png|alt=Angles and Radii]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image: Dimensioning angles and radii&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For an angle, use the menu item &amp;quot;Actions / Angle dimensioning&amp;quot;. First click on the center point with [[M1]] and define the first leg and then the angle and the arc line with the arrows. You can determine whether the angle is displayed in a clockwise direction by the direction in which you sweep over the start leg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then define the shape of the label in the dialog that opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To dimension a radius, please select an arc (torus). Three small black boxes will appear. In the context menu ([[M2]]) of the black boxes, select the &amp;quot;Dimension radius / diameter&amp;quot; item and use [[M1]] to define the direction and length of the arrow. A diameter symbol also appears next to the text in the dialog for full circles. Otherwise, the radius is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:actions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Mesurer et coter]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Messen und Bemaßen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29384</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29384"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:29:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29383</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29383"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:28:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Unicode special chars and foreign languages */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29382</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29382"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:28:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Unicode special chars and foreign languages */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29381</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29381"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:27:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
(special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Panel_13a.png&amp;diff=29380</id>
		<title>File:Panel 13a.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Panel_13a.png&amp;diff=29380"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:18:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Crash_Course_Frontpanel&amp;diff=29379</id>
		<title>Crash Course Frontpanel</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Crash_Course_Frontpanel&amp;diff=29379"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:17:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:frontpanel1ikone.png|300px|right|link=//server.ibfriedrich.com/video/e/frontpanel/frontpanel1_e.mp4]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:frontpanel2ikone.png|300px|right|link=//server.ibfriedrich.com/video/e/frontpanel/frontpanel2_e.mp4]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:frontpanel3ikone.png|300px|right|link=//server.ibfriedrich.com/video/e/frontpanel/frontpanel3_e.mp4]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:panelpool_frontpanel2.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:moreExamples.png|right|link=http://www.panel-pool.com/fpuk/info_beispiele.html]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_1.png]]||[[Determine size of front panel]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_1a.png]]||[[Select material and thickness of front panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_2.png]]|| [[Set grid values]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_3.png]]||[[Insert a rectangular or oblong break-out]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_4.png]]||[[Insert a round, rectangular or oblong sink]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_5.png]]||[[Insert a D-form breakout]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_6.png]]||[[Insert elements from the library]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_7.png]]||[[Place a drill hole]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_8.png]]||[[Place a drill hole with a thread]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_9.png]]||[[Place a drill hole with a sink]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_10.png]]||[[Insert an imprinted text]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_11.png]]||[[Insert engraved text]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_12.png]]||[[Insert a scale]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_13.png]]||[[Insert a picture or logo]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:panel_13a.png]]||[[DXF|Import a DXF file (as front panel outline)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_13b.png]]||[[3D view of the front panel in the Internet browser]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_14.png]]||[[Compute milling paths]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_15.png]]||[[Calculate and send order]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:faq41.jpg]]||[[Front panel questions|Frequently asked questions]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Please also have a look at:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Create and save a milling pattern]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Kurzeinführung Frontplatte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Crash Course Face Avant]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:First steps]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Crash_Course_Frontpanel&amp;diff=29378</id>
		<title>Crash Course Frontpanel</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Crash_Course_Frontpanel&amp;diff=29378"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:17:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:frontpanel1ikone.png|300px|right|link=//server.ibfriedrich.com/video/e/frontpanel/frontpanel1_e.mp4]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:frontpanel2ikone.png|300px|right|link=//server.ibfriedrich.com/video/e/frontpanel/frontpanel2_e.mp4]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:frontpanel3ikone.png|300px|right|link=//server.ibfriedrich.com/video/e/frontpanel/frontpanel3_e.mp4]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:panelpool_frontpanel2.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:moreExamples.png|right|link=http://www.panel-pool.com/fpuk/info_beispiele.html]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_1.png]]||[[Determine size of front panel]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_1a.png]]||[[Select material and thickness of front panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_2.png]]|| [[Set grid values]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_3.png]]||[[Insert a rectangular or oblong break-out]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_4.png]]||[[Insert a round, rectangular or oblong sink]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_5.png]]||[[Insert a D-form breakout]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_6.png]]||[[Insert elements from the library]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_7.png]]||[[Place a drill hole]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_8.png]]||[[Place a drill hole with a thread]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_9.png]]||[[Place a drill hole with a sink]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_10.png]]||[[Insert an imprinted text]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_11.png]]||[[Insert engraved text]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_12.png]]||[[Insert a scale]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_13.png]]||[[Insert a picture or logo]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Bild:panel_13a.png]]||[[DXF|Import a DXF file (as front panel outline)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_13b.png]]||[[3D view of the front panel in the Internet browser]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_14.png]]||[[Compute milling paths]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_15.png]]||[[Calculate and send order]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:faq41.jpg]]||[[Front panel questions|Frequently asked questions]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Please also have a look at:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Create and save a milling pattern]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Kurzeinführung Frontplatte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Crash Course Face Avant]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:First steps]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Context_menu&amp;diff=29377</id>
		<title>Context menu</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Context_menu&amp;diff=29377"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T16:42:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;By clicking the right mousekey &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M2]]&#039;&#039;&#039; a context menu opens which allows to set several properties.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The context menu  in schematic and layout differs only by the entries &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Page&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Layers&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:kontextS_e.jpg]]||[[Image:kontextL_e.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;The context menu in schematic view&#039;&#039;&#039;||&#039;&#039;&#039;The context menu in layout view&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Module&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please have a look in the [[Module]] article&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can create a new (additional) schematic [[Page|page]] or manouvre between the pages&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layers&#039;&#039;&#039;: The dialog &amp;quot;[[Layer|PCB layers]]&amp;quot; opens. It shows the current layer configuration and allows all layer settings.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Grid&#039;&#039;&#039;: The dialog [[Grid|Window grid]] allows all grid settings as well as the preferred drawing unit (metric or imperial). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Simulationmodel&#039;&#039;&#039;: After an Info-box the dialog &amp;quot;Models for ...&amp;quot; opens. You can edit the [[Simulation]]model of the component selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit properties&#039;&#039;&#039;: A component needs to be highlighted for edition. The dialog  [[Edit|&amp;quot;Edit the selected elements&amp;quot;]] opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, selected text can also be aligned:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:AlignTexts.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Left-aligned, right-aligned or aligned horizontally)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When aligning to the left, the text that starts furthest to the left is used as a reference. When aligning to the right, the text that ends furthest to the right is used as a reference. If you want to align to the top, the text located furthest at the top is used as a reference. When aligning to the left or right, TARGET will then ask whether the texts should be distributed evenly vertically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At least two text elements must be selected for the menu item to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Menus]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.[[de: Kontextmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr: Menu contextuelle]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Context_menu&amp;diff=29376</id>
		<title>Context menu</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Context_menu&amp;diff=29376"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T16:41:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;By clicking the right mousekey &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M2]]&#039;&#039;&#039; a context menu opens which allows to set several properties.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The context menu  in schematic and layout differs only by the entries &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Page&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Layers&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:kontextS_e.jpg]]||[[Image:kontextL_e.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;The context menu in schematic view&#039;&#039;&#039;||&#039;&#039;&#039;The context menu in layout view&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Module&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please have a look in the [[Module]] article&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can create a new (additional) schematic [[Page|page]] or manouvre between the pages&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layers&#039;&#039;&#039;: The dialog &amp;quot;[[Layer|PCB layers]]&amp;quot; opens. It shows the current layer configuration and allows all layer settings.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Grid&#039;&#039;&#039;: The dialog [[Grid|Window grid]] allows all grid settings as well as the preferred drawing unit (metric or imperial). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Simulationmodel&#039;&#039;&#039;: After an Info-box the dialog &amp;quot;Models for ...&amp;quot; opens. You can edit the [[Simulation]]model of the component selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit properties&#039;&#039;&#039;: A component needs to be highlighted for edition. The dialog  [[Edit|&amp;quot;Edit the selected elements&amp;quot;]] opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 34, selected text can also be aligned:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:AlignTexts.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Left-aligned, right-aligned or aligned horizontally)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When aligning to the left, the text that starts furthest to the left is used as a reference. When aligning to the right, the text that ends furthest to the right is used as a reference. If you want to align to the top, the text located furthest at the top is used as a reference. When aligning to the left or right, TARGET will then ask whether the texts should be distributed evenly vertically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At least two text elements must be selected for the menu item to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Menus]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.[[de: Kontextmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr: Menu contextuelle]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Context_menu&amp;diff=29375</id>
		<title>Context menu</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Context_menu&amp;diff=29375"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T16:23:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;By clicking the right mousekey &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M2]]&#039;&#039;&#039; a context menu opens which allows to set several properties.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The context menu  in schematic and layout differs only by the entries &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Page&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Layers&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:kontextS_e.jpg]]||[[Image:kontextL_e.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;The context menu in schematic view&#039;&#039;&#039;||&#039;&#039;&#039;The context menu in layout view&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Module&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please have a look in the [[Module]] article&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can create a new (additional) schematic [[Page|page]] or manouvre between the pages&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layers&#039;&#039;&#039;: The dialog &amp;quot;[[Layer|PCB layers]]&amp;quot; opens. It shows the current layer configuration and allows all layer settings.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Grid&#039;&#039;&#039;: The dialog [[Grid|Window grid]] allows all grid settings as well as the preferred drawing unit (metric or imperial). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Simulationmodel&#039;&#039;&#039;: After an Info-box the dialog &amp;quot;Models for ...&amp;quot; opens. You can edit the [[Simulation]]model of the component selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit properties&#039;&#039;&#039;: A component needs to be highlighted for edition. The dialog  [[Edit|&amp;quot;Edit the selected elements&amp;quot;]] opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 34, selected text can also be aligned:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:AlignTexts.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Left-aligned, right-aligned or aligned horizontally)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When aligning to the left, the text that starts furthest to the left is used as a reference. When aligning to the right, the text that ends furthest to the right is used as a reference. If you want to align to the top, the text located furthest at the top is used as a reference. When aligning to the left or right, TARGET will then ask whether the texts should be distributed evenly vertically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Menus]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.[[de: Kontextmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr: Menu contextuelle]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Context_menu&amp;diff=29374</id>
		<title>Context menu</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Context_menu&amp;diff=29374"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T16:22:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;By clicking the right mousekey &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M2]]&#039;&#039;&#039; a context menu opens which allows to set several properties.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The context menu  in schematic and layout differs only by the entries &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Page&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Layers&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:kontextS_e.jpg]]||[[Image:kontextL_e.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;The context menu in schematic view&#039;&#039;&#039;||&#039;&#039;&#039;The context menu in layout view&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Module&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please have a look in the [[Module]] article&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can create a new (additional) schematic [[Page|page]] or manouvre between the pages&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layers&#039;&#039;&#039;: The dialog &amp;quot;[[Layer|PCB layers]]&amp;quot; opens. It shows the current layer configuration and allows all layer settings.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Grid&#039;&#039;&#039;: The dialog [[Grid|Window grid]] allows all grid settings as well as the preferred drawing unit (metric or imperial). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Simulationmodel&#039;&#039;&#039;: After an Info-box the dialog &amp;quot;Models for ...&amp;quot; opens. You can edit the [[Simulation]]model of the component selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit properties&#039;&#039;&#039;: A component needs to be highlighted for edition. The dialog  [[Edit|&amp;quot;Edit the selected elements&amp;quot;]] opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 34, selected text can also be aligned:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:AlignTexts.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Left-aligned, right-aligned or horizontal&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When aligning to the left, the text that starts furthest to the left is used as a reference. When aligning to the right, the text that ends furthest to the right is used as a reference. If you want to align to the top, the text located furthest at the top is used as a reference. When aligning to the left or right, TARGET will then ask whether the texts should be distributed evenly vertically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Menus]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.[[de: Kontextmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr: Menu contextuelle]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:AlignTexts.jpg&amp;diff=29373</id>
		<title>File:AlignTexts.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:AlignTexts.jpg&amp;diff=29373"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T16:22:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Context_menu&amp;diff=29372</id>
		<title>Context menu</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Context_menu&amp;diff=29372"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T16:14:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;By clicking the right mousekey &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M2]]&#039;&#039;&#039; a context menu opens which allows to set several properties.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The context menu  in schematic and layout differs only by the entries &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Page&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Layers&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:kontextS_e.jpg]]||[[Image:kontextL_e.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;The context menu in schematic view&#039;&#039;&#039;||&#039;&#039;&#039;The context menu in layout view&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Module&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please have a look in the [[Module]] article&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can create a new (additional) schematic [[Page|page]] or manouvre between the pages&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layers&#039;&#039;&#039;: The dialog &amp;quot;[[Layer|PCB layers]]&amp;quot; opens. It shows the current layer configuration and allows all layer settings.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Grid&#039;&#039;&#039;: The dialog [[Grid|Window grid]] allows all grid settings as well as the preferred drawing unit (metric or imperial). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Simulationmodel&#039;&#039;&#039;: After an Info-box the dialog &amp;quot;Models for ...&amp;quot; opens. You can edit the [[Simulation]]model of the component selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit properties&#039;&#039;&#039;: A component needs to be highlighted for edition. The dialog  [[Edit|&amp;quot;Edit the selected elements&amp;quot;]] opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 34, selected text can also be aligned:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:AlignTexts.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Left-aligned, right-aligned or horizontal&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When aligning to the left, the text that starts furthest to the left is used as a reference. When aligning to the right, the text that ends furthest to the right is used as a reference. If you want to align to the top, the text located furthest at the top is used as a reference. When aligning to the left or right, TARGET will then ask whether the texts should be distributed evenly vertically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Menus]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.[[de: Kontextmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr: Menu contextuelle]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Measure&amp;diff=29371</id>
		<title>Measure</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Measure&amp;diff=29371"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T15:57:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Tolerances and alternative unit */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by key &#039;&#039;&#039;[u]&#039;&#039;&#039;,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Measure and dimensioning&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; in &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Menu Actions]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
or by the tool [[Image:Measure.jpg]] under the icon [[Image:edit.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
with &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M12]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a quick information the little info box might be sufficient. It is fixed to the cursor as soon as you press the [u]-key for meas&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;u&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ring:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:messen_box_e.jpg|none|Infobox at &amp;quot;measure&amp;quot;]]Image: Infobox at &amp;quot;measure&amp;quot;. The mouse pointer was moved after pressing the [u] key from the red border in the north over the white to the south to the opposite red border. The black line shows the distance.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It means: L=Length of the air wire of the measurement, M=Manhattan Metric= dY+dX, Phi=Angle measured from the starting point of the measurement, started at 15:00 (= 0°) counterclockwise.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Measure and dimensioning ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status line shows the x- and y-portions of the distance (dx and dy), the distance itself (L) and the Manhattan-length (M=dx+dy). When drawing tracks also see the signal length (S). You might switch off the grid for a short time with &#039;&#039;&#039;[F6]&#039;&#039;&#039; to measure very exactly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a dimensioning by pressing...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure1.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &#039;&#039;&#039;...[u]&#039;&#039;&#039; at the starting point&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure2.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   ...and a mouseclick &#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a distance.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure3.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   Now hover the mouse orthogonally to open area and click again.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure4.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   Confirm the opening dialog...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure5.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   ...and see the digits of the dimensioning on your layout or schematic.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit the digits like normal text (doubleclick on it or single click and &#039;&#039;&#039;[e]&#039;&#039;&#039; for edit, then follow the dialog).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tolerances and alternative unit ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Measure4.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 34, you can also specify tolerances and select a second unit in parentheses. If the plus and minus tolerances are identical, TARGET combines them into a single ± value. The following result is displayed:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Measure5.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Entering non measure values ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you enter a different value to the measure dialog box than the one given, e.g. 4.00m instead of 8.255mm, the value is marked by an underscore. This is to indicate that the figure shown is not the one measured by scale but a different figure, entered following the idea of the layouter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:realmassDEF.jpg|none]]Image: The value entered does not represent the real length of the line but a individual value chosen by the designer. indicated by underscore.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Finding coordinates that are not on the grid ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to measure things that are not on the grid, use the [+] key to find these points. Look [[Coordinates|here]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning the drills of the complete layout ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning1.jpg|none]]Find it in menu &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; on the bottom of the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning2.jpg|none]]First you get asked from which diameter the dimensioning shall be displayed. Here we want to have all dimensions from drills bigger than 1.3 mm (included)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning3.jpg|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
That is how it comes out. The digits can be edited like any text.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning using a snap point ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the function &amp;quot;Measure and dimensioning&amp;quot; from menu &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot;. In the status bar you can read &amp;quot;Measure from...&amp;quot;. Hover the mouse close to the starting point but you don&#039;t click. Instead you press keyboard key [+]  Now you can choose from significant points nearby by the use of the keyboard keys &amp;quot;up&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;down&amp;quot; in order to determine the desired snap point. The cursor follows. Press key &amp;quot;Return&amp;quot; for OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In respect to the target coordinate you do exactly the same: move the mouse close to the measuring target. No click! Press key [+], select the point of interest using the arrow keys and press [Return]. Now you only need to decide where to put the measuring arrow (an element of technical drawing). Done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning angles and radii ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of V33, you can also dimension angles and radii very easily:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WinkelUndRadien.png|alt=Angles and Radii]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image: Dimensioning angles and radii&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For an angle, use the menu item &amp;quot;Actions / Angle dimensioning&amp;quot;. First click on the center point with [[M1]] and define the first leg and then the angle and the arc line with the arrows. You can determine whether the angle is displayed in a clockwise direction by the direction in which you sweep over the start leg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then define the shape of the label in the dialog that opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To dimension a radius, please select an arc (torus). Three small black boxes will appear. In the context menu ([[M2]]) of the black boxes, select the &amp;quot;Dimension radius / diameter&amp;quot; item and use [[M1]] to define the direction and length of the arrow. A diameter symbol also appears next to the text in the dialog for full circles. Otherwise, the radius is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Messen und Bemaßen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Mesurer et coter]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:actions]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Measure&amp;diff=29370</id>
		<title>Measure</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Measure&amp;diff=29370"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T15:56:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Toleranzen und alternative Maßeinheit */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by key &#039;&#039;&#039;[u]&#039;&#039;&#039;,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Measure and dimensioning&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; in &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Menu Actions]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
or by the tool [[Image:Measure.jpg]] under the icon [[Image:edit.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
with &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M12]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a quick information the little info box might be sufficient. It is fixed to the cursor as soon as you press the [u]-key for meas&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;u&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ring:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:messen_box_e.jpg|none|Infobox at &amp;quot;measure&amp;quot;]]Image: Infobox at &amp;quot;measure&amp;quot;. The mouse pointer was moved after pressing the [u] key from the red border in the north over the white to the south to the opposite red border. The black line shows the distance.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It means: L=Length of the air wire of the measurement, M=Manhattan Metric= dY+dX, Phi=Angle measured from the starting point of the measurement, started at 15:00 (= 0°) counterclockwise.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Measure and dimensioning ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status line shows the x- and y-portions of the distance (dx and dy), the distance itself (L) and the Manhattan-length (M=dx+dy). When drawing tracks also see the signal length (S). You might switch off the grid for a short time with &#039;&#039;&#039;[F6]&#039;&#039;&#039; to measure very exactly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a dimensioning by pressing...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure1.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &#039;&#039;&#039;...[u]&#039;&#039;&#039; at the starting point&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure2.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   ...and a mouseclick &#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a distance.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure3.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   Now hover the mouse orthogonally to open area and click again.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure4.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   Confirm the opening dialog...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure5.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   ...and see the digits of the dimensioning on your layout or schematic.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit the digits like normal text (doubleclick on it or single click and &#039;&#039;&#039;[e]&#039;&#039;&#039; for edit, then follow the dialog).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tolerances and alternative unit ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Measure4.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 34, you can also specify tolerances and select a second unit in parentheses. If the plus and minus tolerances are identical, TARGET combines them into a single ± value. The following result is displayed:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Measure5.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Entering non measure values ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you enter a different value to the measure dialog box than the one given, e.g. 4.00m instead of 8.255mm, the value is marked by an underscore. This is to indicate that the figure shown is not the one measured by scale but a different figure, entered following the idea of the layouter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:realmassDEF.jpg|none]]Image: The value entered does not represent the real length of the line but a individual value chosen by the designer. indicated by underscore.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Finding coordinates that are not on the grid ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to measure things that are not on the grid, use the [+] key to find these points. Look [[Coordinates|here]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning the drills of the complete layout ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning1.jpg|none]]Find it in menu &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; on the bottom of the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning2.jpg|none]]First you get asked from which diameter the dimensioning shall be displayed. Here we want to have all dimensions from drills bigger than 1.3 mm (included)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning3.jpg|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
That is how it comes out. The digits can be edited like any text.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning using a snap point ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the function &amp;quot;Measure and dimensioning&amp;quot; from menu &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot;. In the status bar you can read &amp;quot;Measure from...&amp;quot;. Hover the mouse close to the starting point but you don&#039;t click. Instead you press keyboard key [+]  Now you can choose from significant points nearby by the use of the keyboard keys &amp;quot;up&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;down&amp;quot; in order to determine the desired snap point. The cursor follows. Press key &amp;quot;Return&amp;quot; for OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In respect to the target coordinate you do exactly the same: move the mouse close to the measuring target. No click! Press key [+], select the point of interest using the arrow keys and press [Return]. Now you only need to decide where to put the measuring arrow (an element of technical drawing). Done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning angles and radii ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of V33, you can also dimension angles and radii very easily:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WinkelUndRadien.png|alt=Angles and Radii]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image: Dimensioning angles and radii&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For an angle, use the menu item &amp;quot;Actions / Angle dimensioning&amp;quot;. First click on the center point with [[M1]] and define the first leg and then the angle and the arc line with the arrows. You can determine whether the angle is displayed in a clockwise direction by the direction in which you sweep over the start leg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then define the shape of the label in the dialog that opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To dimension a radius, please select an arc (torus). Three small black boxes will appear. In the context menu ([[M2]]) of the black boxes, select the &amp;quot;Dimension radius / diameter&amp;quot; item and use [[M1]] to define the direction and length of the arrow. A diameter symbol also appears next to the text in the dialog for full circles. Otherwise, the radius is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Messen und Bemaßen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Mesurer et coter]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:actions]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Measure4.jpg&amp;diff=29369</id>
		<title>File:Measure4.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Measure4.jpg&amp;diff=29369"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T15:54:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: Harald Friedrich uploaded a new version of File:Measure4.jpg&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Measure5.jpg&amp;diff=29368</id>
		<title>File:Measure5.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Measure5.jpg&amp;diff=29368"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T15:51:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: Harald Friedrich uploaded a new version of File:Measure5.jpg&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Measure&amp;diff=29367</id>
		<title>Measure</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Measure&amp;diff=29367"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T15:50:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Toleranzen und alternative Maßeinheit */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by key &#039;&#039;&#039;[u]&#039;&#039;&#039;,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Measure and dimensioning&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; in &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Menu Actions]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
or by the tool [[Image:Measure.jpg]] under the icon [[Image:edit.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
with &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M12]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a quick information the little info box might be sufficient. It is fixed to the cursor as soon as you press the [u]-key for meas&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;u&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ring:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:messen_box_e.jpg|none|Infobox at &amp;quot;measure&amp;quot;]]Image: Infobox at &amp;quot;measure&amp;quot;. The mouse pointer was moved after pressing the [u] key from the red border in the north over the white to the south to the opposite red border. The black line shows the distance.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It means: L=Length of the air wire of the measurement, M=Manhattan Metric= dY+dX, Phi=Angle measured from the starting point of the measurement, started at 15:00 (= 0°) counterclockwise.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Measure and dimensioning ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status line shows the x- and y-portions of the distance (dx and dy), the distance itself (L) and the Manhattan-length (M=dx+dy). When drawing tracks also see the signal length (S). You might switch off the grid for a short time with &#039;&#039;&#039;[F6]&#039;&#039;&#039; to measure very exactly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a dimensioning by pressing...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure1.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &#039;&#039;&#039;...[u]&#039;&#039;&#039; at the starting point&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure2.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   ...and a mouseclick &#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a distance.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure3.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   Now hover the mouse orthogonally to open area and click again.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure4.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   Confirm the opening dialog...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure5.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   ...and see the digits of the dimensioning on your layout or schematic.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit the digits like normal text (doubleclick on it or single click and &#039;&#039;&#039;[e]&#039;&#039;&#039; for edit, then follow the dialog).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Toleranzen und alternative Maßeinheit ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Measure4.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Sie können ab der V34 auch Toleranzen angeben und eine zweite Einheit in Klammern wählen. Sind die  Toleranzen plus und minus identisch, dann fasst TARGET diese zu einem ±-Wert zusammen. Es zeigt sich das folgende Ergebnis:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Measure5.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Entering non measure values ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you enter a different value to the measure dialog box than the one given, e.g. 4.00m instead of 8.255mm, the value is marked by an underscore. This is to indicate that the figure shown is not the one measured by scale but a different figure, entered following the idea of the layouter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:realmassDEF.jpg|none]]Image: The value entered does not represent the real length of the line but a individual value chosen by the designer. indicated by underscore.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Finding coordinates that are not on the grid ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to measure things that are not on the grid, use the [+] key to find these points. Look [[Coordinates|here]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning the drills of the complete layout ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning1.jpg|none]]Find it in menu &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; on the bottom of the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning2.jpg|none]]First you get asked from which diameter the dimensioning shall be displayed. Here we want to have all dimensions from drills bigger than 1.3 mm (included)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning3.jpg|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
That is how it comes out. The digits can be edited like any text.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning using a snap point ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the function &amp;quot;Measure and dimensioning&amp;quot; from menu &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot;. In the status bar you can read &amp;quot;Measure from...&amp;quot;. Hover the mouse close to the starting point but you don&#039;t click. Instead you press keyboard key [+]  Now you can choose from significant points nearby by the use of the keyboard keys &amp;quot;up&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;down&amp;quot; in order to determine the desired snap point. The cursor follows. Press key &amp;quot;Return&amp;quot; for OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In respect to the target coordinate you do exactly the same: move the mouse close to the measuring target. No click! Press key [+], select the point of interest using the arrow keys and press [Return]. Now you only need to decide where to put the measuring arrow (an element of technical drawing). Done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning angles and radii ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of V33, you can also dimension angles and radii very easily:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WinkelUndRadien.png|alt=Angles and Radii]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image: Dimensioning angles and radii&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For an angle, use the menu item &amp;quot;Actions / Angle dimensioning&amp;quot;. First click on the center point with [[M1]] and define the first leg and then the angle and the arc line with the arrows. You can determine whether the angle is displayed in a clockwise direction by the direction in which you sweep over the start leg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then define the shape of the label in the dialog that opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To dimension a radius, please select an arc (torus). Three small black boxes will appear. In the context menu ([[M2]]) of the black boxes, select the &amp;quot;Dimension radius / diameter&amp;quot; item and use [[M1]] to define the direction and length of the arrow. A diameter symbol also appears next to the text in the dialog for full circles. Otherwise, the radius is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Messen und Bemaßen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Mesurer et coter]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:actions]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Measure&amp;diff=29366</id>
		<title>Measure</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Measure&amp;diff=29366"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T15:49:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Entering non measure values */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by key &#039;&#039;&#039;[u]&#039;&#039;&#039;,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Measure and dimensioning&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; in &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Menu Actions]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
or by the tool [[Image:Measure.jpg]] under the icon [[Image:edit.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
with &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M12]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a quick information the little info box might be sufficient. It is fixed to the cursor as soon as you press the [u]-key for meas&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;u&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ring:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:messen_box_e.jpg|none|Infobox at &amp;quot;measure&amp;quot;]]Image: Infobox at &amp;quot;measure&amp;quot;. The mouse pointer was moved after pressing the [u] key from the red border in the north over the white to the south to the opposite red border. The black line shows the distance.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It means: L=Length of the air wire of the measurement, M=Manhattan Metric= dY+dX, Phi=Angle measured from the starting point of the measurement, started at 15:00 (= 0°) counterclockwise.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Measure and dimensioning ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status line shows the x- and y-portions of the distance (dx and dy), the distance itself (L) and the Manhattan-length (M=dx+dy). When drawing tracks also see the signal length (S). You might switch off the grid for a short time with &#039;&#039;&#039;[F6]&#039;&#039;&#039; to measure very exactly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a dimensioning by pressing...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure1.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &#039;&#039;&#039;...[u]&#039;&#039;&#039; at the starting point&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure2.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   ...and a mouseclick &#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a distance.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure3.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   Now hover the mouse orthogonally to open area and click again.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure4.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   Confirm the opening dialog...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure5.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   ...and see the digits of the dimensioning on your layout or schematic.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit the digits like normal text (doubleclick on it or single click and &#039;&#039;&#039;[e]&#039;&#039;&#039; for edit, then follow the dialog).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Toleranzen und alternative Maßeinheit ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Bild:Measure4.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Sie können ab der V34 auch Toleranzen angeben und eine zweite Einheit in Klammern wählen. Sind die  Toleranzen plus und minus identisch, dann fasst TARGET diese zu einem ±-Wert zusammen. Es zeigt sich das folgende Ergebnis:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Bild:Measure5.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Entering non measure values ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you enter a different value to the measure dialog box than the one given, e.g. 4.00m instead of 8.255mm, the value is marked by an underscore. This is to indicate that the figure shown is not the one measured by scale but a different figure, entered following the idea of the layouter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:realmassDEF.jpg|none]]Image: The value entered does not represent the real length of the line but a individual value chosen by the designer. indicated by underscore.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Finding coordinates that are not on the grid ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to measure things that are not on the grid, use the [+] key to find these points. Look [[Coordinates|here]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning the drills of the complete layout ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning1.jpg|none]]Find it in menu &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; on the bottom of the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning2.jpg|none]]First you get asked from which diameter the dimensioning shall be displayed. Here we want to have all dimensions from drills bigger than 1.3 mm (included)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning3.jpg|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
That is how it comes out. The digits can be edited like any text.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning using a snap point ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the function &amp;quot;Measure and dimensioning&amp;quot; from menu &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot;. In the status bar you can read &amp;quot;Measure from...&amp;quot;. Hover the mouse close to the starting point but you don&#039;t click. Instead you press keyboard key [+]  Now you can choose from significant points nearby by the use of the keyboard keys &amp;quot;up&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;down&amp;quot; in order to determine the desired snap point. The cursor follows. Press key &amp;quot;Return&amp;quot; for OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In respect to the target coordinate you do exactly the same: move the mouse close to the measuring target. No click! Press key [+], select the point of interest using the arrow keys and press [Return]. Now you only need to decide where to put the measuring arrow (an element of technical drawing). Done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning angles and radii ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of V33, you can also dimension angles and radii very easily:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WinkelUndRadien.png|alt=Angles and Radii]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image: Dimensioning angles and radii&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For an angle, use the menu item &amp;quot;Actions / Angle dimensioning&amp;quot;. First click on the center point with [[M1]] and define the first leg and then the angle and the arc line with the arrows. You can determine whether the angle is displayed in a clockwise direction by the direction in which you sweep over the start leg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then define the shape of the label in the dialog that opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To dimension a radius, please select an arc (torus). Three small black boxes will appear. In the context menu ([[M2]]) of the black boxes, select the &amp;quot;Dimension radius / diameter&amp;quot; item and use [[M1]] to define the direction and length of the arrow. A diameter symbol also appears next to the text in the dialog for full circles. Otherwise, the radius is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Messen und Bemaßen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Mesurer et coter]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:actions]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29354</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29354"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T14:19:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Elements of the Text dialog */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Position&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
Under ‘’&#039;“Content”‘’&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;[multiline]‘’&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The ‘’&#039;[Windows]‘’&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The ‘’&#039;[Unicode]‘’&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘[A]‘’’ and ‘’‘[a]‘’’ buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The ‘’‘[A✓]‘’’ button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a ‘’&#039;font&#039;‘’. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows ‘borrows’ from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’&#039;“Font height”‘’&#039; and ‘’&#039;“-width”‘’&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the ‘’&#039;font size in pt (points)‘’&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘“stroke width”’‘’ is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (‘’‘Alignment’‘’ and ‘’‘Mirrored’‘’). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’&#039;“Fixed”‘’&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; ‘‘‘Right-aligned’’’ shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and ‘’‘Italic’‘’ makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Page’’’ determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘‘&#039;Layer’’&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Aura’‘’ represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the ‘’&#039;“Minimum Width”‘’&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;“Function”‘’&#039; text can be “Normal Text,” meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component name&#039;‘’ for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component value&#039;‘’ (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Symbol name&#039;‘’ for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039; &#039;‘&#039;Signal name’&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Pin name&#039;‘’ for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification date&#039;‘’ for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification time&#039;‘’ for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output date&#039;‘’ for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output time&#039;‘’ for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output scale&#039;‘’ for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Project name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;File name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page number&#039;‘’ for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Special property&#039;‘’ for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant&#039;‘’ for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component type&#039;‘’ for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page name&#039;‘’ for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Number&#039;‘’ for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Revision&#039;‘’ for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Signal Pages&#039;‘’ for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Component Usage’‘’ For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Version’‘’ For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Comment’‘’ For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Highest Page Number’‘’ For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_TextOptDlg.jpg|left]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
(special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29351</id>
		<title>Create component from PDF</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29351"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T14:02:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: Undo revision 29341 by Judith Friedrich (talk)&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ab der V34 können Sie sich Bauteile per KI direkt aus PDF-Datenblättern erzeugen lassen. Dazu müssen Sie nichts anderes tun, als ein aussagekräftiges Datenblatt herunterladen und TARGET zur Verfügung stellen. Das Datenblatt wird dabei zur Analyse an eine externe KI gesendet und dort analysiert. Dann erzeugt TARGET aus dem Datenbaltt ein Bauteilsymbol und schlägt ein (hoffentlich) vorhandenes Gehäuse dazu vor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Im Schaltplan-Menü &amp;quot;Bauteile / Spezialfunktionen&amp;quot; klicken Sie auf den Punkt &amp;quot;PDF-Datenblatt in Bauteil umsetzen (externe KI)&amp;quot;. Nach einer Erläuterung wählen Sie die PDF-Datei aus (meist im Windows-Ordner &amp;quot;Downloads&amp;quot;) und stellen die TARGET zur Verfügung. Geheime PDFs oder PDFs mit privatem Inhalt sollten Sie nicht hier hochladen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Besonders, wenn die Bauteil-Informationen im PDF als Bilder und nicht als Texte gespeichert sind, kann die Auswertung sehr lange dauern (OCR, KI-Thinking-Model). Wenn Sie nicht so lange warten möchten, können Sie den Vorgang abbrechen und z.B. nach einer Viertelstunde mit der identischen PDF-Datei nochmal starten. Die KI hat sich die erzeugte Antwort zu diesem PDF gemerkt und gibt das Ergebnis sofort zurück.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp1.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Bild 1: Warten bis z.B. &amp;quot;vs1053.pdf&amp;quot; von der KI verarbeitet wurde)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dieses Bauteil-Symbol wurde von TARGET daraus erzeugt:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp2.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Bild 2: Fertiges Symbol, bereit zur Überprüfung und Veränderung)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Ihnen das Bauteil-Symbol gefällt, können Sie es nun als User-Bauteil exportieren:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp3.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Bild 3: Bauteil insgesamt mit Taste [x] e&#039;&#039;&#039;x&#039;&#039;&#039;portieren)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dabei müssen Sie noch den Bauteiltyp auswählen (hier &amp;quot;Sonstige Audio&amp;quot; für einen Audio-Codec), den Namen eingeben (hier &amp;quot;VS1053b&amp;quot;), den Hersteller auswählen (hier &amp;quot;VLSI&amp;quot;), das richtige Gehäuse &amp;quot;LQFP48&amp;quot; auswählen (die KI hatte bei LQFP-48 noch einen Bindestrich eingebaut), ggf. eine Funktion aus dem PDF hereinkopieren und em Ende den Präfix &amp;quot;IC&amp;quot; auswählen. Mit dem Klick auf den Button [Bauteil speichern] ist die Arbeit beendet und das IC kann verwendet werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dieses Tool eignet sich vor allem für Bauteile mit vielen Anschlüssen und mit Standard-Gehäusen. Dann kann es viel Schreibarbeit sparen. Gehäuse selbst, z.B. für einen SMD-USB-Stecker werden davon nicht erzeugt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Créer composant à partir d&#039;un PDF]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bauteil aus PDF erzeugen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29350</id>
		<title>Create component from PDF</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29350"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T14:02:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: Undo revision 29342 by Judith Friedrich (talk)&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also access “T-3001” without TARGET [https://office.ibfriedrich.com/chatBot/T-3001.html here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use AI to generate components directly from PDF datasheets. All you need to do is download a suitable datasheet and make it available to TARGET. The datasheet is sent to an external AI for analysis. TARGET then generates a component symbol from the datasheet and suggests a (hopefully) available package for it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the schematic menu under “Components / Special Functions,” click on “Convert PDF Datasheet to Component (External AI).” After a brief explanation, select the PDF file (usually in the Windows “Downloads” folder) and make it available to TARGET. You should not upload confidential PDFs or PDFs with private content here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Especially if the component information in the PDF is stored as images rather than text, the analysis can take a very long time (OCR, AI Thinking Model). If you don’t want to wait that long, you can cancel the process and, for example, start again after fifteen minutes with the same PDF file. The AI has remembered the generated response for this PDF and returns the result immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp1.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 1: Wait until, for example, “vs1053.pdf” has been processed by the AI)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This component symbol was generated by TARGET from it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp2.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 2: Finished symbol, ready for review and&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dieses Tool eignet sich vor allem für Bauteile mit vielen Anschlüssen und mit Standard-Gehäusen. Dann kann es viel Schreibarbeit sparen. Gehäuse selbst, z.B. für einen SMD-USB-Stecker werden davon nicht erzeugt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Créer composant à partir d&#039;un PDF]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bauteil aus PDF erzeugen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29349</id>
		<title>Create component from PDF</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29349"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T14:02:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: Undo revision 29343 by Judith Friedrich (talk)&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also access “T-3001” without TARGET [https://office.ibfriedrich.com/chatBot/T-3001.html here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use AI to generate components directly from PDF datasheets. All you need to do is download a suitable datasheet and make it available to TARGET. The datasheet is sent to an external AI for analysis. TARGET then generates a component symbol from the datasheet and suggests a (hopefully) available package for it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the schematic menu under “Components / Special Functions,” click on “Convert PDF Datasheet to Component (External AI).” After a brief explanation, select the PDF file (usually in the Windows “Downloads” folder) and make it available to TARGET. You should not upload confidential PDFs or PDFs with private content here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Especially if the component information in the PDF is stored as images rather than text, the analysis can take a very long time (OCR, AI Thinking Model). If you don’t want to wait that long, you can cancel the process and, for example, start again after fifteen minutes with the same PDF file. The AI has remembered the generated response for this PDF and returns the result immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp1.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 1: Wait until, for example, “vs1053.pdf” has been processed by the AI)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This component symbol was generated by TARGET from it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp2.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 2: Finished symbol, ready for review and modifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dieses Tool eignet sich vor allem für Bauteile mit vielen Anschlüssen und mit Standard-Gehäusen. Dann kann es viel Schreibarbeit sparen. Gehäuse selbst, z.B. für einen SMD-USB-Stecker werden davon nicht erzeugt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Créer composant à partir d&#039;un PDF]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bauteil aus PDF erzeugen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29348</id>
		<title>Create component from PDF</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29348"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T14:00:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: Undo revision 29347 by Harald Friedrich (talk)&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also access “T-3001” without TARGET [https://office.ibfriedrich.com/chatBot/T-3001.html here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use AI to generate components directly from PDF datasheets. All you need to do is download a suitable datasheet and make it available to TARGET. The datasheet is sent to an external AI for analysis. TARGET then generates a component symbol from the datasheet and suggests a (hopefully) available package for it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the schematic menu under “Components / Special Functions,” click on “Convert PDF Datasheet to Component (External AI).” After a brief explanation, select the PDF file (usually in the Windows “Downloads” folder) and make it available to TARGET. You should not upload confidential PDFs or PDFs with private content here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Especially if the component information in the PDF is stored as images rather than text, the analysis can take a very long time (OCR, AI Thinking Model). If you don’t want to wait that long, you can cancel the process and, for example, start again after fifteen minutes with the same PDF file. The AI has remembered the generated response for this PDF and returns the result immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp1.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 1: Wait until, for example, “vs1053.pdf” has been processed by the AI)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This component symbol was generated by TARGET from it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp2.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 2: Finished symbol, ready for review and modifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tool is particularly well-suited for components with many connections and standard packages. It can save a lot of paperwork in such cases. However, it does not generate the packages themselves—for example, for an SMD USB connector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Créer composant à partir d&#039;un PDF]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bauteil aus PDF erzeugen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29347</id>
		<title>Create component from PDF</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29347"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T13:56:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also access “T-3001” without TARGET [https://office.ibfriedrich.com/chatBot/T-3001.html here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use AI to generate components directly from PDF datasheets. All you need to do is download a suitable datasheet and make it available to TARGET. The datasheet is sent to an external AI for analysis. TARGET then generates a component symbol from the datasheet and suggests a (hopefully) available package for it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the schematic menu under “Components / Special Functions,” click on “Convert PDF Datasheet to Component (External AI).” After a brief explanation, select the PDF file (usually in the Windows “Downloads” folder) and make it available to TARGET. You should not upload confidential PDFs or PDFs with private content here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Especially if the component information in the PDF is stored as images rather than text, the analysis can take a very long time (OCR, AI Thinking Model). If you don’t want to wait that long, you can cancel the process and, for example, start again after fifteen minutes with the same PDF file. The AI has remembered the generated response for this PDF and returns the result immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp1.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Bild 1: Warten bis z.B. &amp;quot;vs1053.pdf&amp;quot; von der KI verarbeitet wurde)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dieses Bauteil-Symbol wurde von TARGET daraus erzeugt:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp2.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Bild 2: Fertiges Symbol, bereit zur Überprüfung und Veränderung)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Ihnen das Bauteil-Symbol gefällt, können Sie es nun als User-Bauteil exportieren:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp3.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Bild 3: Bauteil insgesamt mit Taste [x] e&#039;&#039;&#039;x&#039;&#039;&#039;portieren)&lt;br /&gt;
This tool is particularly well-suited for components with many connections and standard packages. It can save a lot of paperwork in such cases. However, it does not generate the packages themselves—for example, for an SMD USB connector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Créer composant à partir d&#039;un PDF]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bauteil aus PDF erzeugen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:PDF2Comp3.png&amp;diff=29346</id>
		<title>File:PDF2Comp3.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:PDF2Comp3.png&amp;diff=29346"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T13:54:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:PDF2Comp2.png&amp;diff=29345</id>
		<title>File:PDF2Comp2.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:PDF2Comp2.png&amp;diff=29345"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T13:54:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:PDF2Comp1.png&amp;diff=29344</id>
		<title>File:PDF2Comp1.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:PDF2Comp1.png&amp;diff=29344"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T13:53:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29337</id>
		<title>Create component from PDF</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29337"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T13:34:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ab der V34 können Sie sich Bauteile per KI direkt aus PDF-Datenblättern erzeugen lassen. Dazu müssen Sie nichts anderes tun, als ein aussagekräftiges Datenblatt herunterladen und TARGET zur Verfügung stellen. Das Datenblatt wird dabei zur Analyse an eine externe KI gesendet und dort analysiert. Dann erzeugt TARGET aus dem Datenbaltt ein Bauteilsymbol und schlägt ein (hoffentlich) vorhandenes Gehäuse dazu vor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Im Schaltplan-Menü &amp;quot;Bauteile / Spezialfunktionen&amp;quot; klicken Sie auf den Punkt &amp;quot;PDF-Datenblatt in Bauteil umsetzen (externe KI)&amp;quot;. Nach einer Erläuterung wählen Sie die PDF-Datei aus (meist im Windows-Ordner &amp;quot;Downloads&amp;quot;) und stellen die TARGET zur Verfügung. Geheime PDFs oder PDFs mit privatem Inhalt sollten Sie nicht hier hochladen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Besonders, wenn die Bauteil-Informationen im PDF als Bilder und nicht als Texte gespeichert sind, kann die Auswertung sehr lange dauern (OCR, KI-Thinking-Model). Wenn Sie nicht so lange warten möchten, können Sie den Vorgang abbrechen und z.B. nach einer Viertelstunde mit der identischen PDF-Datei nochmal starten. Die KI hat sich die erzeugte Antwort zu diesem PDF gemerkt und gibt das Ergebnis sofort zurück.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp1.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Bild 1: Warten bis z.B. &amp;quot;vs1053.pdf&amp;quot; von der KI verarbeitet wurde)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dieses Bauteil-Symbol wurde von TARGET daraus erzeugt:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp2.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Bild 2: Fertiges Symbol, bereit zur Überprüfung und Veränderung)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Ihnen das Bauteil-Symbol gefällt, können Sie es nun als User-Bauteil exportieren:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp3.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Bild 3: Bauteil insgesamt mit Taste [x] e&#039;&#039;&#039;x&#039;&#039;&#039;portieren)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dabei müssen Sie noch den Bauteiltyp auswählen (hier &amp;quot;Sonstige Audio&amp;quot; für einen Audio-Codec), den Namen eingeben (hier &amp;quot;VS1053b&amp;quot;), den Hersteller auswählen (hier &amp;quot;VLSI&amp;quot;), das richtige Gehäuse &amp;quot;LQFP48&amp;quot; auswählen (die KI hatte bei LQFP-48 noch einen Bindestrich eingebaut), ggf. eine Funktion aus dem PDF hereinkopieren und em Ende den Präfix &amp;quot;IC&amp;quot; auswählen. Mit dem Klick auf den Button [Bauteil speichern] ist die Arbeit beendet und das IC kann verwendet werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dieses Tool eignet sich vor allem für Bauteile mit vielen Anschlüssen und mit Standard-Gehäusen. Dann kann es viel Schreibarbeit sparen. Gehäuse selbst, z.B. für einen SMD-USB-Stecker werden davon nicht erzeugt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Créer composant à partir d&#039;un PDF]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bauteil aus PDF erzeugen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>